گرامر برای مکالمه زبان انگلیسی2

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ) ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ) ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪(by‬ﺗﺎ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ (For) +‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ Å‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ + by +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪Subject + will have been + verb + ing+ for +‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 8‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪We will have been studying for two hours by eight o’clock.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪We will have been living in tehran for ten years by next month.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪Will‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪By +‬‬

‫‪108‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ" ﺑﻮﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ( For ) +‬ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ Å‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪ + before/when +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪Subject + had been + verb + ing + for +‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I had been teaching for half an hour when you came.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I had been doing the cooking for two hours before you called.‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ had‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ before, when‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪109‬‬

talkative :

‫ﭘﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ‬

crowded :

intelligent :

‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺵ‬

taciturn :

ugly : considerable :

rich :

‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬

110

‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬ ‫ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺛﺮﻭﺗﻤﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬

‫‪adjective‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪careful student .‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪my new green book.‬‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to be +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to get +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to turn +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to become +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to grow +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to make +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻥ – ﺷﺪﻥ – ﮔﺸﺘﻦ – ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻥ ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑـﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪link‬‬ ‫‪ verb‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪My father grew angry .‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪In spring the leaves turn green‬‬ ‫‪Today the weather got cold .‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪. ( .‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪+‬‬

‫‪Seem / Appear/ Look/ Sound/ Taste / Smell / Feel‬‬

‫‪111‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪he looks( angrily ) angry.‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪the soup tastes ( unusually ) unusual.‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﭖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ‪ this, that‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪These books .‬‬

‫‪This book Æ‬‬

‫‪Those books .‬‬

‫‪That book Æ‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Helen is as tall as Susan.‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪as‬‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬

‫‪as‬‬ ‫‪not so‬‬

‫‪Hellen is as tall as Susan.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen is not so tall as Susan.‬‬

‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ) ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ( ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪112‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )‪ ( than‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hellen is taller than Susan.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ) ‪ ( more‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪My book is more interesting than yours .‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻼ ‪ :‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )ﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ‪ est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hellen is the tallest student in the class .‬‬ ‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ‪ most‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪My book is the most interesting book in the library.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ :‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪er‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ est‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬ ‫‪busy → busier than → the busiest‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪ more‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ most‬ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Active / more active than / the most active‬‬ ‫‪Comic / more comic than / the most comic‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ‪:‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪113‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬

‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬

‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

good – well

better than

the best

bad - ill

worse than

the worst

much many

More than

the most

Little

Less than

the least

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‬

elder ------

the eldest

‫ﻓﺮﺩ – ﺷﺨﺺ‬

older than

the oldest

old ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬

Farther than

the farthest

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬

Further than

the furthest

far

114

‫‪The same as‬‬ ‫‪ : same‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ )‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ – ﻳﻚ ( ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hellen and Jane live in the same street.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻭ ﺟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ) ‪ ( er , re , le , ow‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ‪ most , more‬ﻫـﻢ ﺗﻔﻀـﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪the most narrow‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬

‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪more narrow than‬‬

‫‪narrow‬‬

‫‪the narrowest‬‬

‫‪narrower than‬‬

‫‪narrow‬‬

‫‪the most simple‬‬

‫‪more simple than‬‬

‫‪simple‬‬

‫‪simpler than‬‬

‫‪simple‬‬

‫‪the simplest‬‬ ‫‪the most clever‬‬

‫‪more clever than‬‬

‫‪clever‬‬

‫‪the cleverest‬‬

‫‪cleverer than‬‬

‫‪clever‬‬

‫‪the most obscure‬‬ ‫‪the obscurest‬‬

‫‪more obscure than‬‬ ‫‪obscurer than‬‬

‫‪obscure‬‬ ‫‪obscure‬‬

‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ happy‬ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﺪﻥ ‪ er,est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ‪y‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ i‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬

‫‪115‬‬

‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ e‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ wide‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ st , r‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Wide Æ wider than Æ the widest‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻧﻜـﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ big‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺑـﻲ ﺻـﺪﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Big Æ bigger than Æ the biggest‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻔﺶ‬

‫‪a pair of shoes‬‬

‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬

‫‪crowded‬‬

‫ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ‬

‫‪trousers‬‬

‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﺎﺭ – ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‬

‫‪busy‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﭽﻲ‬

‫‪scissors‬‬

‫ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬

‫‪noisy‬‬

‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‬

‫‪glass‬‬

‫ﻧﯽ ‪ -‬ﻗﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺷﻨﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬

‫‪cane‬‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬

‫‪ball point pen‬‬ ‫‪fountain pen‬‬

‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪: the same‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same as‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬

‫) ﻣﺜﻞ – ﺷﺒﻴﻪ – ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ‪ like‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Your shoes are the same as mine.‬‬

‫‪116‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ + as‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪the same +‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪the‬‬ ‫‪ same‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Hellen is as old as Susan.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen is the same age as Susan.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫‪size‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍ‬

‫ﺑﺰﺭﮒ‬

‫‪big‬‬

‫‪tall -‬‬

‫‪length‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯ‬

‫‪long‬‬

‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎ‬

‫‪width‬‬

‫ﭘﻬﻦ‬

‫‪wide‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻖ‬

‫‪depth‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻴﻖ‬

‫‪deep‬‬

‫ﺳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬

‫‪age‬‬ ‫‪height‬‬

‫‪117‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﻦ – ﭘﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ – ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬

‫‪old‬‬ ‫‪high‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫‪adverb‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺼﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪sincerely‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﻠﺺ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬

‫‪quickly‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬

‫‪carefully‬‬

‫‪sincere‬‬ ‫‪quick‬‬ ‫‪careful‬‬

‫ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hellen speak slowly .‬‬ ‫‪Hellen apeaks English slowly .‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼً ‪:‬‬ ‫‪He left the room quickly .‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Long‬‬

‫‪Short‬‬

‫‪Hard‬‬

‫‪Fast‬‬

‫‪Early‬‬

‫‪Late‬‬

‫‪Much‬‬

‫‪Little‬‬

‫‪Just‬‬

‫‪Still‬‬

‫‪Far‬‬

‫‪Near‬‬

‫‪Low‬‬

‫‪Soon‬‬

‫‪Straight‬‬

‫‪Enough‬‬

‫‪118‬‬

‫‪a nap‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a shower‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a test-exam‬‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a bath‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a dictation‬‬

‫‪Take‬‬

‫‪a trip‬‬

‫ﺳﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪a vehicle‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen doesn’t behave the same kind as her father .‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He types the letters faster than my secretery.‬‬

‫‪119‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I never get up later than my parents .‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﺍﻭ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻌﹰﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Hellen is a fast typist.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen is fast.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hellen types fast.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪Hellen looks fast.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ‬

‫‪lovely‬‬

‫ﺻﻤﻴﻤﻲ‬

‫‪friendly‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪kingly‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﮔﺒﺎﺭ‬

‫‪deadly‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫‪worldy‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪likely‬‬

‫ﭘﺪﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬

‫‪fatherly‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬

‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬

‫‪ugly‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﻤﻘﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ‬

‫‪motherly‬‬ ‫‪sily‬‬ ‫‪sisterly‬‬

‫‪Hellen is a friendly girl.‬‬ ‫‪120‬‬

‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪ ly‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺖ ‪ friendlyLY‬ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Fashion‬‬ ‫‪Way‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ‬

‫………… ‪In a/ an +‬‬

‫‪Manner‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen speaks in a friendly manner.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻱ ﺳـﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳـﭗ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪as‬‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫‪as‬‬

‫‪not as/not so‬‬

‫‪Hellen types as slowly as Susan.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen doesn’t type so/as slowly as Susan.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪121‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ more than‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Hellen drives more slowly than Susan.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen drives faster than Susan.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ) ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ( ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ "ﺗﺮﻳﻦ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﺶ ‪ the most‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ the est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Hellen types the most slowly.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen types the fastest.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﺗﺮﻳﻦ” ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪...........‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫} ﻭﺟﻪ ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ /‬ﺷﻜﻞ {‬

‫‪122‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪intensifiers :‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much, many‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠـﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪much +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪many +‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ many‬ﺍﺳـﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ much‬ﻭ ‪ many‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫?‪Has Hellen written many letters‬‬ ‫?‪Does Hellen drink much coffee‬‬ ‫‪Helen has not written many letters.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen doesn’t drink much coffee.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ ‪ a lot of‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Hellen has written a lot of letters.‬‬ ‫‪Hellen drinks a lot of coffee.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ too‬ﻳﺎ ‪ very‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Too‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪+‬‬

‫‪Very‬‬

‫‪123‬‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬

:‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬very ‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬: too & very ‫ﻓﺮﻕ‬ The park is very beautiful. The teacher speaks very fluently. : ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬too ‫ﺍﻣﺎ‬ It is too cold today. That driver drives too slowly. :‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬many ‫ ﻭ‬much ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬too, very There were too many cars in the street. Hellen drinks too much water in a day. She knows very many words. Thank you very much.

.‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬very , too ‫ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬، ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬enough ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬

‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/ ‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+

enough

You are rich enough . He speaks fluently enough . :‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬enough ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬ They spend enough money in a month .

: ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

Little

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

Few

124

‫‪ : few & little‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I have little money in my pocket.‬‬ ‫‪He knows few words.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ few‬ﻭ ‪ little‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ )‪(a‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪a little‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫‪a few‬‬

‫‪I drink a little coffee after dinner.‬‬ ‫‪He has a few books in his book case.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪all‬‬ ‫‪plenty of – a great deal of – a lot of‬‬

‫‪a lot of – a large number of – plenty of‬‬

‫‪most‬‬

‫‪most‬‬

‫‪much‬‬

‫‪many‬‬ ‫‪some‬‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫‪some‬‬ ‫‪-------‬‬

‫‪several‬‬

‫‪a little‬‬

‫‪a few‬‬ ‫‪little‬‬

‫‪few‬‬ ‫‪no‬‬ ‫‪125‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪She Spends little money and I spend much.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬

‫‪126‬‬

‫‪Such‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Helen hasn't said such words.‬‬ ‫‪Helen doesn't like such weather.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Such a/an‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Such a child can't stay quiet.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Such‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪Such a/an +‬‬ ‫‪I haven’t seen such an interesting film so far.‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ Such‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ so‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+ a an +‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪So +‬‬ ‫‪I haven't seen so interesting a film so far.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ‪ Very‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪a + Very +‬‬

‫‪127‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﺬﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺷﻤﺰﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻡ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﻛﺎﺏ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺑﻨﻮﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪128‬‬

enough ‫ و‬too ‫ﺑﺎ‬

‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

.‫ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬enough ‫ ﻳﺎ‬too ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ .‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬:1

too + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

She is too young to work. She drives too slowly to arrive on time.

‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬/‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬+ enough + to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ 1.She is rich enough to buy the house. 2.They work hard enough to earn a lot of money.

.‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬:2

too + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ for ‫ ﺷﺨﺺ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.The car is too expensive for me to buy. 2.You speak too fast for me to under stand.

‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ enough + for ‫ ﺷﺨﺺ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ 1.The book is easy enough for us to read. 2.You sigh beautifully enough for them to enjoy.

129

‫»‪«Other‬‬

‫»ﺩﻳﮕﺮ«‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪John has polished other shoes too.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪This child wants another toy.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )ﭼﻪ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ the other‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪I don't like this hat. I like the other hat.‬‬ ‫‪I don't like these shoes but I like the other shoes.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪another +‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫‪+‬‬

‫‪the other‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫‪+‬‬

‫‪the other‬‬

‫‪Ö‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ‪Other+‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ one‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ones‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪another one‬‬ ‫‪the other one‬‬

‫‪other ones‬‬

‫‪the other ones‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ another‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I don't like this hat, I like the other. Hat.‬‬ ‫‪This child wants another hat.‬‬

‫‪130‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﺟﻤﻊ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ )‪ (S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ـ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ → ‪others‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻭﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺎ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ → ‪The others‬‬ ‫‪I don't like these shoes. I Like the others.‬‬ ‫‪John has polished others too.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬

‫‪each other‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬

‫‪one another‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ‪ -‬ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ahmad and I know each other.‬‬ ‫‪People must help one another.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ‪ together‬ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ـ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to gather‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Helen and jane study together.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺩﻳﮕﺮ« ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪every other days = on alternate days‬‬

‫ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫‪the other day = some days ago‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫‪other wise = or else‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻻـ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ‬

‫‪on the other hand = in other words‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪131‬‬

‫‪other than = except‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬

‫‪one after another = one by one‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻢ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ـ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ـ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬ـ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬ـ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪132‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ـ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﮔﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬ـ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬ـ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11‬ـ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﭼﻤﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13‬ـ ﺗﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14‬ـ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪133‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪Isn’t this the largest building in this area‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He had picked the most beautiful flower from this garden.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Helen isn't so/as intelligent as her sister.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He is supposed to take the most expensive present for his father.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Mr. Smith is the fastest typist in this office.‬‬ ‫‪6‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Our house is more expensive than the house that you have bought.‬‬ ‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He used to live in the smallest house in this street.‬‬ ‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I could drive the longest road in this country for 24 hours.‬‬ ‫‪9‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪134‬‬

I think, your shoes are cheaper than mine .‫ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻡ‬10 This is the most interesting present that I have bought.

135

‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪Relative Pronouns‬‬

‫ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ Link‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ‪) +‬ﻛﻪ( ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ )ﻙ ـ ﻩ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ who‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The man.‬‬

‫‪The man works here.‬‬

‫‪…the man who works here.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ whom‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The man‬‬

‫‪I know the man.‬‬

‫‪…the man whom I know.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The bus‬‬

‫‪The bus stops here everyday.‬‬

‫‪…the bus which stops here everyday.‬‬ ‫‪4‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The book‬‬

‫‪I study the book.‬‬

‫‪…the book which I study.‬‬ ‫‪5‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ where‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪they live in it.‬‬

‫‪The house.‬‬

‫‪the house where they live ( in ).‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ where‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪136‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ when‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I was born in the year.‬‬

‫‪The year.‬‬

‫‪The year when I was born.‬‬ ‫‪7‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪his wife works with me.‬‬

‫‪The man‬‬

‫‪…The man whose wife works with me.‬‬ ‫‪the dog the name of which was top of.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎ‬

‫‪…The dog whose name was Top‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ ‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫…‪The room whose door‬‬ ‫…‪The room the door of which‬‬ ‫‪8‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ which‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ The thing‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ‪ The thing which‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ what‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪The thing which you need is fresh air.‬‬ ‫‪What you need is fresh air.‬‬ ‫‪10‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ why‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I study English for that reason.‬‬

‫‪The reason.‬‬

‫‪The reason why I study English is that I want to go abroad.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ The reason why‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ That‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻪ ‪. because‬‬

‫‪137‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻـﻮﻟﻲ )‪ ،(who‬ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺿـﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ They‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ Those‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪we who work hard‬‬

‫‪I who work hard.‬‬

‫‪you who work hard‬‬

‫‪You who work hard.‬‬ ‫‪It who works hard.‬‬

‫‪Those who work hard.‬‬

‫‪She who works hard.‬‬ ‫‪He who works hard.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‪ 3 ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ whom ، who‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺑـﺎ ‪that‬‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪The man who works here is my uncle.‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫‪The man whom you saw yesterday wants you.‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫‪The house which is on the corner is mine.‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫‪The house which you bought is too expensive.‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ‪ whom‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪The man which you saw yesterday wants you.‬‬ ‫‪The house which you bought is too expensive.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (necessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )‪ (defining‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪a writer is a person.‬‬

‫‪138‬‬

‫ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ‪ Person‬ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪a writer is a person who writes novel.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ none defining‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hafez is a great poet.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣـﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻـﺪ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪ (unnecessary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hafez who lives in Shiraz, is a great poet.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﺎ )‪ (،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﺸـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ‪ none defining‬ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬ ‫‪ defining‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪139‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬ـ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪140‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ does-did‬ـ‬

‫‪to do‬‬

‫‪ has-had‬ـ‬

‫‪to have‬‬

‫‪ am-is-are-was-were‬ـ‬

‫‪to be‬‬

‫ـ ـ‬

‫‪to need‬‬ ‫‪can‬‬

‫‪ Could‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ Might‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪may‬‬

‫ـ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪must‬‬

‫‪ Should‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪shall‬‬

‫‪ Would‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪will‬‬ ‫ـ‬

‫‪ used to‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ‬ ‫‪ ought to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ـ‬

‫‪ to be supposed to‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫ـ‬

‫‪ had better‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫ـ‬

‫‪ would rather‬ـ‬

‫ـ‬

‫‪ have to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ـ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )‪ (can, may, shall, will, must‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‬ ‫)‪.(modal‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ would-should-might-could‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ‪،‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪141‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ(‬ ‫‪Bob can come now. → Bob can come tomorrow.‬‬ ‫‪Bob could come now. → Bob could come tomorrow.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bob could come yesterday.‬‬ ‫‪I knew that Bob could come.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ Should‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ـ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Helen should be resting.‬‬

‫)ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hellen Shouldn’t be resting.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬

‫‪It may be raining.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ can , must , may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪Hellen must have seen the film. .‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪142‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ‪ might-ought to-should-could-would‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪could ‬‬ ‫‪should ‬‬ ‫)ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ( ‪would  + have P.P‬‬ ‫‪might ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ought to ‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪I should have gone there.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪I shouldn’t have gone there.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻤﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻤﺸﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪143‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻫﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬ـ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻔﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬ـ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪144‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I will have graduated from high school by next year.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Reza will have returned home by five o’clock.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Subject + will have + Past Participle‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ← )‪ (By tomorrow‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪By +‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ←‬

‫‪in ‬‬ ‫‪ two weeks‬‬ ‫‪within ‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪4‬ـ‬

‫ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪by the time‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+‬‬

‫‪before‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪+‬‬

‫‪as soon as‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪when‬‬

‫‪145‬‬

‫‪Conditionals‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ )‪ (main clause‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪if +‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﺎ )ﻭ(‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪ + if +‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪if +‬‬

‫‪If Helen has money, she can buy the car.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ )‪ (Possible‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪146‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫ﻭ‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ +‬ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪if +‬‬

‫‪If Helen had money now, she could buy the car.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ )‪ (imaginary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫ﻭ‬

‫‪ + have + P.P‬ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫‪have + P.P‬‬

‫‪if +‬‬

‫‪If Hellen had had money, she could have bought the book yesterday.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧـﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺎ )‪ (impossible‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪If I had money today, I would buy this book.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪If I had money yesterday , I would have bought this car.‬‬

‫‪147‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺑـﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪she doesn't try if she tried , she would succeed.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪She didn't try, if she had tried , she would have succeeded.‬‬

‫‪148‬‬

‫‪Otherwise‬‬

‫» ﻭﺍﻻ«‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ if clause‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪They didn’t invite me, If they had invited me, I would have gone.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪They didn’t invite me; other wise, I would have gone.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ otherwise‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﺮﻃﻲ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪They don't invite me, other wise, I would go.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ otherwise‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Don’t smoke, otherwise, you will get used to it.‬‬

‫‪149‬‬

‫» ‪« Wish‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ـ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ wish‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I wish to see them.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I want to see them.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ wish‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺵ ـ ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﺭﺯﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺘﻤﻲ ﻭﻳﻘﻴﻨـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ‪ wish‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟـﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺑﺎ ‪ would‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪I wish they would call me tomorrow.‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I wish They called me now.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪I wish They had called me yesterday.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪150‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪if‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ if‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪on condition‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪  Pr ovided‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫‪ Pr oviding‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪ Suppose‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬ ‫‪Suppo sin g‬‬

‫‪I will sign the contract provided you give me some money.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ if‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Suppose it rained now ، I would stay home.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻛﻪ» ‪« It is time‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺗـﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫـﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻋـﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪it’s time + to‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ‬

‫‪it’s time to finish the job.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪it is time +‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻲ‬

‫‪151‬‬

‫‪it’s time you finished the job.‬‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪IF‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ‪ if‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(1‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Should‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪If I should see him, I will tell him.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Should‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ‪ if‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Should I see him. I will tell him.‬‬ ‫‪(2‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ were‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪If you were here, I would talk to you.‬‬ ‫‪Were you here, I would talk to you.‬‬ ‫‪(3‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ had‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪if I had gone there, I would have seen him.‬‬ ‫‪Had I gone there, I would have seen him.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ Should :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ« ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪If I should see him now, I would tell him.‬‬ ‫‪Should I see him now, I would tell him.‬‬

‫‪152‬‬

‫‪Unless‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ if‬ﻭ ‪ not‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻜﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪You won't succeed if you don't try.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪You won’t succeed unless you try.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ‪ unless‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Unless you try, you won't succeed.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪If not = unless‬‬ ‫‪If = unless not‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Unless you don’t try, you will succeed = Unless you try, you won't succeed.‬‬

‫‪153‬‬

‫‪Would rather‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ Prefer‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ would rather‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ prefer‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Prefer‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ would rather‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I prefer to stay there.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather stay there.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + would rather +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪(2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I prefer to go rather than to stay.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + rather than + to‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather go than stay.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + than +‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + would rather +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ (2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘـﹰﺎ ﺑـﺎ ‪ would rather‬ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫‪ prefer‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I prefer walking to staying.‬‬ ‫‪I prefer apple to banana.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + to +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + prefer +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪154‬‬

‫‪(3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I Prefered to go.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather have gone.‬‬ ‫‪ + would rather + have P.P‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪(4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer him to go.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + to‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ + prefer +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather him went.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪+‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪+ would rather +‬‬

‫‪155‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪as if – as though‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ـ ﮔﻮﻳﻲ« ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴـﺖ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺋﻲ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He behaves as if he didn’t like his wife.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪She speaks as if she knew the problem.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He walked as if he had had a broken leg.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪156‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﻨﻪ( » ‪« in Case‬‬

‫)ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I take an umbrella with me in case it rains.‬‬ ‫‪ :In case‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ + {incase} +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺍﻣﺮ‬

‫‪Helen has left the door open, in case Her mother comes earlier.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ + {incase} +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪/‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪/‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪She was running fast in case she missed the class.‬‬

‫‪157‬‬

‫‪Both‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪the‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪both the  +‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪both‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪both of‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪both of +‬‬

‫‪Both students study hard.‬‬ ‫‪Both of us study hard.‬‬ ‫‪(2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The students both study hard.‬‬ ‫‪The students can both study hard.‬‬ ‫‪The students are both studying hard.‬‬

‫‪ both -‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪158‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + both +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + both‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ + to be + both‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫‪active & passive voice :‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Voice‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ active‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ passive‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ‪ passive‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ‪ active‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ) ‪ ( Subject‬ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ doer‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪Hellen studies the book . .‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪Subject‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Sufferer‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Hellen is seen by them.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ‪ neither doer not sufferer‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Hellen is a student.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ Subject‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ sufferer‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ‪ Subject‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪159‬‬

‫ﻼ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ participle‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪present participle‬‬ ‫‪Participle‬‬ ‫‪Past participle‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ing‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫‪Æ living = alive‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺍﻥ‬

‫‪running‬‬

‫‪live‬‬

‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪run Æ‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﻳﺪﻥ‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ed‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫‪Æ washed‬‬

‫‪wash‬‬

‫ﺷﺴﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪fall‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ‬

‫‪fallen‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻔﻌـﻮﻝ ﻧﻤـﻲ‬ ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪I go with him .‬‬

‫‪160‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ go‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ ‪ him‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ go‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ with‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ – ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ – ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪To be + p p‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﻭ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪He tells her.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ ( ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Subject sufferer‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪He tells her.‬‬ ‫‪She ----------.‬‬

‫‪161‬‬

‫ﺝ ( ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ by‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He tells her.‬‬ ‫‪She ----------- by him.‬‬ ‫ﺩ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p . p‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪He tells her.‬‬ ‫‪She -----------told by him.‬‬ ‫ﻫـ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p . p‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He tells her.‬‬ ‫‪She is told by him.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺐ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪162‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-10‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻥ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﻳﺸﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1694‬ﻛﺸﻒ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﻬﺮ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ 80‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﻘﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪163‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ :‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-1 Helen tells Bob Æ Bob is told by Helen. :‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-2 Helene told Bob Æ Bob was told by Helen. :‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-3 Helen will tell Bob Æ Bob will be told by Helen. :‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬-4 Helen is telling Bob Æ Bob is being told by Helen. :‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬-5 Helen was telling Bob Æ Bob was being told by Helen.

:‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-6 Helen has told Bob Æ Bob has been told by Helen.

:‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-7 Helen will have told Bob Æ Bob will have been told by Helen. :‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-8 Helen had told Bob Æ Bob had been told by Helen.

‫ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ‬،‫ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬،‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬4 ‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬16 ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ . ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬

164

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫? ‪Did Hellen study the book‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪The book was studied by Hellen .‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪Was the book studied by Hellen‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺳـﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﻣﺜـﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫? ‪Where did Hellen take the book‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Was the book taken by Helen.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ ( whom,who‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪Where was the book taken by Helen‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ‪ who‬ﻭ ‪ whom‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ‪ whom‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬـﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘـﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ‪ whom‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ who‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫?‪Whom did Helen invite‬‬ ‫?‪Who was invited by Helen‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ‪ who‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫?‪Who saw Helen‬‬

‫‪165‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ‪ by whom‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫?‪By whom was bob seen‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻳﺰﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺗﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﻬﺎ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪166‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Helen often visits john.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p.p‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪John is often visited by Helen.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Helen writes letters carefully.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p.p‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪The letters are carefully written by Helen.‬‬ ‫‪: just -2‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪ just‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ have‬ﻳﺎ ‪ had‬ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Helen has just written the letter.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ just‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ be‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ‪ p.p‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪The letter has just been written by Helen.‬‬

‫‪167‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻥ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻠﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ؟‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﻳﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-10‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I write the letter to him.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪168‬‬

‫‪The letter is written to him by me.‬‬ ‫‪He is written the letter by me.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I saw Helen play.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻴﺰﺩ ﺗﺎ ‪ subject suffer‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ‪to‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Helen was seen to play.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ + be + p.p‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪let +‬‬

‫‪Open the door Æ let the door be opened.‬‬

‫‪169‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ‬

‫ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﻡ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻛﺲ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ( ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + have +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I have my brother polish my shoes.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ get‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + get +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I get my brother to polish my shoes.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪170‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﻔﺎﺵ ﺗﺨﺖ ﻛﻔﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻡ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺭﻭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + have/get +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I have my shoes polished.‬‬

‫‪171‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ‬

‫‪reported speach‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺳـﺨﻦ ﻳـﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ‪( direct speech‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻘـﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen says, “I live in Tehran”.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫”?‪Helen says, “where do you live‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen says, “open the window”.‬‬ ‫”‪Helen says, “what a nice car it is‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪“I live in Tehran,” Helen says.‬‬ ‫‪“Where do you live?” Helen says.‬‬ ‫‪“Open the window,” Helen says.‬‬ ‫‪“What a nice car it is!” Helen says.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪“I live in Tehran,” Says she.‬‬

‫‪172‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪Indirect speech‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﺔ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫”‪Helen said, “I live in Tehran.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ comma‬ﻭ ﻛﻮﺗﻴﺸﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ) ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘـﻞ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ ‪ that‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ ( ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫… ‪Helen said that‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Helen said that she ...‬‬ ‫ﺝ( ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Helen said that she lived in Tehran.‬‬ ‫ﺩ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷـﮕﺮ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 12‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(1‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Helen said to bob, “I know your father”.‬‬ ‫‪Helen told Bob that she knew his father.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫”‪My father said to me, “I am listening to you.‬‬ ‫‪My father told me that he was listening to me.‬‬

‫‪173‬‬

:‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬3 The boy said to the girl, “I haven’t seen your book.” The boy told the girl that he hadn’t seen her book.

:‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬4 My friend said, “I have been living here for ten years.” My friend said that he had been living here for ten years. :‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬5 The man said to the woman, “I will see you.” The man told the woman that he would see her. :‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬6 Ahmad said, “I will be working on Friday.” Ahmad said that he would be working on Friday morning.

:‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬7 Bob said, “I will have finished the book on April.” Bob said that he would have finished the book on April.

:‫ ﻣﺜﻼ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬8 Bob said, “I will have been studying for two years by April.” Bob said that he would have been studying for two years by April. :‫ﻼ‬ ‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬9 My father said to me, “I saw your umberella.” My father told me that he had seen my umberella.

174

‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﮕـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪My father told me that he saw my umberella.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (10‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫”‪Bob said, “I was listening to the music.‬‬ ‫‪Bob said that he had been listening to music.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫”‪The woman said, “I had left home.‬‬ ‫‪The woman said that she had left home.‬‬

‫”‪Bob said, “I had been playing for two hours.‬‬ ‫‪Bob said that he had been playing for two hours.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ) ‪ ( reporting tag‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ say to‬ﻳﺎ ‪ tell‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫”‪Helen said to/told Bob, “I know your father.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣّﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ‪ say to‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ tell‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Helen told Bob that she knew his father‬‬

‫‪175‬‬

‫» ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ «‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫”?‪Helen said to me, “where do you live‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ) ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ( ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ ‪ wh‬ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Helen asked me where I lived.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﭼﺎﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺯﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼﻫﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺶ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-9‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-10‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪176‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫”?‪Helen said to Bob, “do you live in Tehran‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ‪ if‬و ‪ whether‬ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Helen asked Bob if he lived in Tehran.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ask‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ if‬ﻭ ‪ whether‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “open the door.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (to‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ ( not to‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪Helen told Bob to open the door.‬‬ ‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “don’t open the door.‬‬ ‫‪Helen told Bob not to open the door.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “open the door before you come in.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Helen told Bob to open the door before he comes in.‬‬ ‫‪177‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺪﻩ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﻭﺳﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻃﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﭘﻠﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺯﺩ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﭼﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺷﻠﻮﻍ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪178‬‬

The following + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ next + ‫→ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

The next + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ The + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬+ after

The + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬+ before last + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

→ The + previous + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

today → that day tonight → that night now → then here → there come → go this → that Helen said to Bob, “I will meet you next week.” Helen told Bob that she would meet him the next week.

179

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫!‪What a nice car it is‬‬

‫! ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪what + a/an +‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫! ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪how +‬‬ ‫!‪How slowly she drives‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫”!‪Helen said, “how slowly the man works‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ what‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ how‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪Helen exclaimed how slowly the man worked.‬‬

‫‪180‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ) ‪( gerund‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﻫـﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Æ living‬‬

‫ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫‪being‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬

‫‪live‬‬

‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪be Æ‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ . to‬ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴـﺰ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪After locking the door, I left home.‬‬ ‫‪She is afraid of telling lies.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪To swim here is enjoyable.‬‬ ‫‪Swimming here is enjoyable.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ – ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪defer‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪avoid‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬

‫‪delay‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪appreciate‬‬

‫ﻧﺼﺤﻴﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪advise‬‬

‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪detest‬‬

‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪discuss‬‬

‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪enjoy‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪consider‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪finish‬‬

‫ﭼﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪can’t help‬‬

‫‪181‬‬

‫‪admit‬‬

‫ﻋﻔﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪forgive‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫‪include‬‬

‫ﻗﺪﻏﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪forbid‬‬

‫‪keep‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪imagine‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪mention‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬

‫‪oppose‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪quit‬‬

‫ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬

‫‪risk‬‬

‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪deny‬‬

‫‪mind‬‬ ‫‪postpone‬‬

‫‪remember‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪practice‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ‬

‫‪stop‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪resume‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪tolerate‬‬

‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪suggest‬‬

‫ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ‬

‫‪understand‬‬

‫‪I enjoy reading the newspaper.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ )‪ (′s‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫‪I appreciate her speaking.‬‬ ‫‪I appreciate Helen’s speaking.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﺶ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﺠﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪182‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻟﻮﮒ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺱ ﻛﺒﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﺻـﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ )‪ (′s‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I appreciate her working.‬‬ ‫‪I appreciate Helen’s working.‬‬

‫‪183‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪:to‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ prefer‬ﻭ ‪ start‬ﻭ ‪ plan‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪to‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Helen prefers to go.‬‬ ‫‪Helen prefers going.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ remember , stop‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻴﺸـﺎﻥ ﻓـﺮﻕ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﺸﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I stop speaking to the man.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I stopped to speak to the man.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Helen remembers locking the door.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﺎﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ remember‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ remember‬ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ) ‪ ( not forget‬ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Helen remembers to lock the door.‬‬

‫‪184‬‬

‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪she parked the car. She went shopping.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓـﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ‪(Present .‬‬ ‫)‪ prefect‬ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪Have + ing + p.p‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪( after ) having parked the car, she went shopping.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬

‫‪WwW.MihanDownload.CoM‬‬

‫‪185‬‬